1. The Effects of Tourism Developments on the Built Environment in Small Island Developing States,Scenarios, frameworks. The case study of Santa Catharina, Curacao
By: Siegmar Thielman
Supervisory Committee:
Prof.ir. Hans de Jonge
Strategic Real Estate Planning
Prof. Andy van den Dobbelsteen
Climate & Design Sustainability
Alexander Vollebregt, Ir. A.G
Spatial Planning & Strategy
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

2. 6. Project Santa Catharina 7. Comments & Questions
Content
Introduction
2. Research design
3. Theoretical input
4. Empirical research
5. Practical results
6. Project Santa Catharina
7. Comments & Questions
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

3. The research Introduction1
Problem statement
Aim & Objectives
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Research questions

4. 1. RESEARCH INTRODUCTION
The tourism industry
Eight of the world's ten biggest cities are located on the coast:
80% of all tourism takes place in coastal areas
Eco systems, flora and fauna
3 billion people live within 60 kilometres of a coastline Population Reference Bureau 2009
Small island developing states are faced with Environmental decline.
SIDS represent 3.7% of worlds total International Tourism World tourism organisation 2005
> 36 MILLION

5. 1 What are small island developing states?
Animated title moves behind picture
(Intermediate)
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 3.17”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 9.5”.
Drag the rectangle slightly above the middle of the slide.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Left.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
In the Angle box, enter 0.
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 50% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).
Select the next stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
To reproduce the “heading” text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, select Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter the heading text, and then select text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font list, select Calibri.
In the Font Size box, enter 38.
Click Bold.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Drag the text box just above the rectangle, in the right half of the slide.
To reproduce the second text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter three lines of text with paragraph breaks, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font Size list, select 28.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Paragraph dialog box launcher. In the Paragraph dialog box, do the following:
On the Indents and Spacing tab, under General, select Left in the Alignment box.
Under Spacing, select 12 in the After box.
Drag the second text box onto the rectangle, below the “heading” text box.
To reproduce the full-color picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 5.08” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Glow and Soft Edges in the left pane, and then, in the Glow and Soft Edges pane, do the following:
Under Glow, click the button next to Presets, and then click Blue, 5 pt glow Accent color 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Drag the full-color picture on top of the rectangle, to the left of the text boxes.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Top.
To reproduce the second picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 2.44” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, drag the new picture directly below the first one, and then, in the Format Picture dialog box, in the Crop tab, under Picture Position, adjust the Offset X and Offset Y settings to align the content of the two images so that they appear continuous.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Picture Corrections in the left pane, and in the Picture Corrections pane, under Brightness and Contrast, do the following:
In the Brightness box, enter 70%.
In the Contrast box, enter -70%.
Select the smaller picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Bottom.
Press and hold CTRL, and then select both pictures. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Selected Objects.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Delay box, enter 1.5.
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Motion Paths click Lines.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Left.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the slide, select the motion path for the “heading” text box, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point about 1.5” off the left edge of the slide. (Note: If your lines of text are longer than in the example above, you may need to further increase the length of the motion path. )
On the slide, select the second text box. On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click the Show Additional Effect Options dialog box launcher. In the Fade dialog box, do the following:
On the Effect tab, in the Animate text list, select By Letter.
In the % delay between letters box, enter 5.
On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select After Previous.
In the Duration list, select 0.5 seconds (Very Fast).
On the Text Animation tab, in the Group text list, select By 1st Level Paragraphs.
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
One the Design tab, in the Background group, click Background Styles, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 40%.
Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 232, Green: 227, and Blue: 216.
Source: United Nations Department of Economic and social affairs list lists 52 small island developing states

6. 1.Positive aspects of Tourism destinations
Creation of job opportunities
Attracts investors
Infrastructure & Amenities
Pride in the region identity:
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

7. PROBLEM STATEMENT Cultural/ Local
Displacement of local residents because of increasing visitor pressure in certain areas
Economical
General Price increase: Retailers and suppliers increase the prices of goods and services;
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Environmental
Visual disturbance. degradation and destruction of urban landscapes environment

8. PROBLEM STATEMENT Cultural/ Local
Changes to urban space: Displacement of local residents because of increasing visitor pressure in certain areas
80 to 90 percent of the sewage generated across the region by hotels is disposed of in near shore coastal waters without adequate treatment (CTO, 2006).
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Environmental
Visual disturbance of coastlines by massive developments => degradation and destruction of urban landscapes environment

9. 1.Aim & Objectives
To outline a core set of indicators for physical tourism developments.
To identify which conceptual “Sustainable Design Models” are applicable for tourism developments.
To develop a sustainable vision for Santa Catharina.
Animated title moves behind picture
(Intermediate)
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 3.17”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 9.5”.
Drag the rectangle slightly above the middle of the slide.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Left.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
In the Angle box, enter 0.
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 50% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).
Select the next stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
To reproduce the “heading” text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, select Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter the heading text, and then select text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font list, select Calibri.
In the Font Size box, enter 38.
Click Bold.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Drag the text box just above the rectangle, in the right half of the slide.
To reproduce the second text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter three lines of text with paragraph breaks, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font Size list, select 28.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Paragraph dialog box launcher. In the Paragraph dialog box, do the following:
On the Indents and Spacing tab, under General, select Left in the Alignment box.
Under Spacing, select 12 in the After box.
Drag the second text box onto the rectangle, below the “heading” text box.
To reproduce the full-color picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 5.08” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Glow and Soft Edges in the left pane, and then, in the Glow and Soft Edges pane, do the following:
Under Glow, click the button next to Presets, and then click Blue, 5 pt glow Accent color 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Drag the full-color picture on top of the rectangle, to the left of the text boxes.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Top.
To reproduce the second picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 2.44” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, drag the new picture directly below the first one, and then, in the Format Picture dialog box, in the Crop tab, under Picture Position, adjust the Offset X and Offset Y settings to align the content of the two images so that they appear continuous.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Picture Corrections in the left pane, and in the Picture Corrections pane, under Brightness and Contrast, do the following:
In the Brightness box, enter 70%.
In the Contrast box, enter -70%.
Select the smaller picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Bottom.
Press and hold CTRL, and then select both pictures. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Selected Objects.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Delay box, enter 1.5.
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Motion Paths click Lines.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Left.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the slide, select the motion path for the “heading” text box, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point about 1.5” off the left edge of the slide. (Note: If your lines of text are longer than in the example above, you may need to further increase the length of the motion path. )
On the slide, select the second text box. On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click the Show Additional Effect Options dialog box launcher. In the Fade dialog box, do the following:
On the Effect tab, in the Animate text list, select By Letter.
In the % delay between letters box, enter 5.
On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select After Previous.
In the Duration list, select 0.5 seconds (Very Fast).
On the Text Animation tab, in the Group text list, select By 1st Level Paragraphs.
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
One the Design tab, in the Background group, click Background Styles, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 40%.
Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 232, Green: 227, and Blue: 216.

10. 1.Research question
What are the effects of physical tourism developments on SIDS and how can there be a balance between the main dimensions in order to guarantee long term sustainability?
Sub questions:
What are physical tourism developments?
What are the main dimensions?
What are the effects and how can these be measured (assessed)?
Animated title moves behind picture
(Intermediate)
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 3.17”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 9.5”.
Drag the rectangle slightly above the middle of the slide.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Left.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
In the Angle box, enter 0.
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 50% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).
Select the next stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
To reproduce the “heading” text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, select Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter the heading text, and then select text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font list, select Calibri.
In the Font Size box, enter 38.
Click Bold.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Drag the text box just above the rectangle, in the right half of the slide.
To reproduce the second text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter three lines of text with paragraph breaks, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font Size list, select 28.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Paragraph dialog box launcher. In the Paragraph dialog box, do the following:
On the Indents and Spacing tab, under General, select Left in the Alignment box.
Under Spacing, select 12 in the After box.
Drag the second text box onto the rectangle, below the “heading” text box.
To reproduce the full-color picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 5.08” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Glow and Soft Edges in the left pane, and then, in the Glow and Soft Edges pane, do the following:
Under Glow, click the button next to Presets, and then click Blue, 5 pt glow Accent color 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Drag the full-color picture on top of the rectangle, to the left of the text boxes.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Top.
To reproduce the second picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 2.44” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, drag the new picture directly below the first one, and then, in the Format Picture dialog box, in the Crop tab, under Picture Position, adjust the Offset X and Offset Y settings to align the content of the two images so that they appear continuous.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Picture Corrections in the left pane, and in the Picture Corrections pane, under Brightness and Contrast, do the following:
In the Brightness box, enter 70%.
In the Contrast box, enter -70%.
Select the smaller picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Bottom.
Press and hold CTRL, and then select both pictures. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Selected Objects.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Delay box, enter 1.5.
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Motion Paths click Lines.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Left.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the slide, select the motion path for the “heading” text box, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point about 1.5” off the left edge of the slide. (Note: If your lines of text are longer than in the example above, you may need to further increase the length of the motion path. )
On the slide, select the second text box. On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click the Show Additional Effect Options dialog box launcher. In the Fade dialog box, do the following:
On the Effect tab, in the Animate text list, select By Letter.
In the % delay between letters box, enter 5.
On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select After Previous.
In the Duration list, select 0.5 seconds (Very Fast).
On the Text Animation tab, in the Group text list, select By 1st Level Paragraphs.
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
One the Design tab, in the Background group, click Background Styles, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 40%.
Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 232, Green: 227, and Blue: 216.

11. The research design 2 Research design
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

12. 2.Research Design
The high concentration of people in coastal regions has produced many economic benefits, including improved transportation links, industrial and urban development, revenue from tourism, and food production. But the combined effects of booming population growth and economic and technological development are threatening the ecosystems that provide these economic benefits

13. The theorical input 3 Research domain, scale scope
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

14. 3. Research search domains
Tourism accommodation development
Animated title moves behind picture
(Intermediate)
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 3.17”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 9.5”.
Drag the rectangle slightly above the middle of the slide.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Left.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
In the Angle box, enter 0.
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 50% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).
Select the next stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
To reproduce the “heading” text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, select Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter the heading text, and then select text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font list, select Calibri.
In the Font Size box, enter 38.
Click Bold.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Drag the text box just above the rectangle, in the right half of the slide.
To reproduce the second text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter three lines of text with paragraph breaks, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font Size list, select 28.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Paragraph dialog box launcher. In the Paragraph dialog box, do the following:
On the Indents and Spacing tab, under General, select Left in the Alignment box.
Under Spacing, select 12 in the After box.
Drag the second text box onto the rectangle, below the “heading” text box.
To reproduce the full-color picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 5.08” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Glow and Soft Edges in the left pane, and then, in the Glow and Soft Edges pane, do the following:
Under Glow, click the button next to Presets, and then click Blue, 5 pt glow Accent color 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Drag the full-color picture on top of the rectangle, to the left of the text boxes.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Top.
To reproduce the second picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 2.44” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, drag the new picture directly below the first one, and then, in the Format Picture dialog box, in the Crop tab, under Picture Position, adjust the Offset X and Offset Y settings to align the content of the two images so that they appear continuous.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Picture Corrections in the left pane, and in the Picture Corrections pane, under Brightness and Contrast, do the following:
In the Brightness box, enter 70%.
In the Contrast box, enter -70%.
Select the smaller picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Bottom.
Press and hold CTRL, and then select both pictures. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Selected Objects.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Delay box, enter 1.5.
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Motion Paths click Lines.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Left.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the slide, select the motion path for the “heading” text box, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point about 1.5” off the left edge of the slide. (Note: If your lines of text are longer than in the example above, you may need to further increase the length of the motion path. )
On the slide, select the second text box. On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click the Show Additional Effect Options dialog box launcher. In the Fade dialog box, do the following:
On the Effect tab, in the Animate text list, select By Letter.
In the % delay between letters box, enter 5.
On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select After Previous.
In the Duration list, select 0.5 seconds (Very Fast).
On the Text Animation tab, in the Group text list, select By 1st Level Paragraphs.
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
One the Design tab, in the Background group, click Background Styles, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 40%.
Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 232, Green: 227, and Blue: 216.

15. 3 . Identify the dimensions
Animated title moves behind picture
(Intermediate)
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 3.17”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 9.5”.
Drag the rectangle slightly above the middle of the slide.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Left.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
In the Angle box, enter 0.
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 50% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).
Select the next stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
To reproduce the “heading” text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, select Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter the heading text, and then select text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font list, select Calibri.
In the Font Size box, enter 38.
Click Bold.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Drag the text box just above the rectangle, in the right half of the slide.
To reproduce the second text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter three lines of text with paragraph breaks, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font Size list, select 28.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Paragraph dialog box launcher. In the Paragraph dialog box, do the following:
On the Indents and Spacing tab, under General, select Left in the Alignment box.
Under Spacing, select 12 in the After box.
Drag the second text box onto the rectangle, below the “heading” text box.
To reproduce the full-color picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 5.08” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Glow and Soft Edges in the left pane, and then, in the Glow and Soft Edges pane, do the following:
Under Glow, click the button next to Presets, and then click Blue, 5 pt glow Accent color 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Drag the full-color picture on top of the rectangle, to the left of the text boxes.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Top.
To reproduce the second picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 2.44” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, drag the new picture directly below the first one, and then, in the Format Picture dialog box, in the Crop tab, under Picture Position, adjust the Offset X and Offset Y settings to align the content of the two images so that they appear continuous.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Picture Corrections in the left pane, and in the Picture Corrections pane, under Brightness and Contrast, do the following:
In the Brightness box, enter 70%.
In the Contrast box, enter -70%.
Select the smaller picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Bottom.
Press and hold CTRL, and then select both pictures. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Selected Objects.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Delay box, enter 1.5.
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Motion Paths click Lines.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Left.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the slide, select the motion path for the “heading” text box, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point about 1.5” off the left edge of the slide. (Note: If your lines of text are longer than in the example above, you may need to further increase the length of the motion path. )
On the slide, select the second text box. On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click the Show Additional Effect Options dialog box launcher. In the Fade dialog box, do the following:
On the Effect tab, in the Animate text list, select By Letter.
In the % delay between letters box, enter 5.
On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select After Previous.
In the Duration list, select 0.5 seconds (Very Fast).
On the Text Animation tab, in the Group text list, select By 1st Level Paragraphs.
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
One the Design tab, in the Background group, click Background Styles, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 40%.
Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 232, Green: 227, and Blue: 216.
Although Ko (2005) proposes eight dimensions of sustainable tourism development (STD).

16. 3 . Identify the Indicators Indicators of Economic sustainabilty
-Tourism seasonality indicators
-Tourst income, arrivals, accomdations, employment
Indicators of Social Sustainability
Indicators of Enviromental sustainablity
Perception studies have been widely employed, among others, in examining tourism impacts, the quality of service and marketing (Andereck et al. 2005;
Animated title moves behind picture
(Intermediate)
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.
Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 3.17”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 9.5”.
Drag the rectangle slightly above the middle of the slide.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Left.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
In the Angle box, enter 0.
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 50% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).
Select the next stop in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
To reproduce the “heading” text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, select Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter the heading text, and then select text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font list, select Calibri.
In the Font Size box, enter 38.
Click Bold.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Drag the text box just above the rectangle, in the right half of the slide.
To reproduce the second text box on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Enter three lines of text with paragraph breaks, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:
In the Font Size list, select 28.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Paragraph dialog box launcher. In the Paragraph dialog box, do the following:
On the Indents and Spacing tab, under General, select Left in the Alignment box.
Under Spacing, select 12 in the After box.
Drag the second text box onto the rectangle, below the “heading” text box.
To reproduce the full-color picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 5.08” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Glow and Soft Edges in the left pane, and then, in the Glow and Soft Edges pane, do the following:
Under Glow, click the button next to Presets, and then click Blue, 5 pt glow Accent color 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
Drag the full-color picture on top of the rectangle, to the left of the text boxes.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Top.
To reproduce the second picture on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, resize or crop the image so that the height is set to 2.44” and the width is set to 2.61”. To crop the picture, click Crop in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Crop position, enter values into the Height, Width, Left, and Top boxes. To resize the picture, click Size in the left pane, and in the right pane, under Size and rotate, enter values into the Height and Width boxes.
On the slide, drag the new picture directly below the first one, and then, in the Format Picture dialog box, in the Crop tab, under Picture Position, adjust the Offset X and Offset Y settings to align the content of the two images so that they appear continuous.
Also in the Format Picture dialog box, click Picture Corrections in the left pane, and in the Picture Corrections pane, under Brightness and Contrast, do the following:
In the Brightness box, enter 70%.
In the Contrast box, enter -70%.
Select the smaller picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Bottom.
Press and hold CTRL, and then select both pictures. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align Selected Objects.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Delay box, enter 1.5.
On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Motion Paths click Lines.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Left.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the slide, select the motion path for the “heading” text box, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point about 1.5” off the left edge of the slide. (Note: If your lines of text are longer than in the example above, you may need to further increase the length of the motion path. )
On the slide, select the second text box. On the slide, select the “heading” text box. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then under Entrance click Fade.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click the Show Additional Effect Options dialog box launcher. In the Fade dialog box, do the following:
On the Effect tab, in the Animate text list, select By Letter.
In the % delay between letters box, enter 5.
On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select After Previous.
In the Duration list, select 0.5 seconds (Very Fast).
On the Text Animation tab, in the Group text list, select By 1st Level Paragraphs.
To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:
One the Design tab, in the Background group, click Background Styles, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Radial.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 40%.
Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 232, Green: 227, and Blue: 216.
Excessive depletion of resources has a major impact on the enviroment and damages residents’ living environment but also lowers tourists’ willingness to revisit” (Tsaur, Lin & Lin 2006: 643).

17. 4. The empirical research
The case of study Curacao
Scenario
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Interviews
Case studies

18. 4.1 The case study of Curacao
Facts:
Population:
Size: 444 km2
Density: 319 / km2
Length: 61 km
Width: 5 tot 14 km
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

19. 4.1 Swot analyses
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

20. 4.1 Why Scenarios
The possible outcomes of policies or courses of actions.
Various outcomes can be compared
Outcomes of development strategies, including externalities
Examine key differences from the choices
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

21. 4.2 Indicators of Economic sustainabilty
Weekend Curacao
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Exclusive Curacao
Dynamic Curacao

22. 4.2 Indicators of Economical sustainabilty
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

23. Dynamic Curacao The key points of this scenario are:
— high disposable income
— favourable exchange rates
— growth from business and holiday tourism
— 13.8 per cent growth in tourism expenditure.
— Curacao Space Experience Centre
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

24. Dynamic Curacao Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

25. Dynamic Curacao 1.1 Million arrivals 2020
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
1.1 Million arrivals 2020

26. Accomodation Future supply
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Triple of existing stiock

27. Weekend Curacao The key points of this scenario are: — direct access
— strong competition for disposable income
— favourable exchange rates which attract
Caribbean visitors
— lots of competition from other destinations
— transport is a key driver
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

28. Weekend Curaçao Weekend getaway Caribbean destination leisure time
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Weekend getaway
short-break
Caribbean destination leisure time
Falling air fares & hotel prices
Competition

29. Weekend Curacao Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

30. Exclusive Curacao The key points of this scenario are:
— decline in international tourism
— international luxury and exclusive resorts
— uncompetitive and expensive destination
— substantial decline in the short-break market
— 1.1 per cent growth per annum.
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

31. Exclusive Curacao
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

32. Summary Scenarios Dynamic Curacao 1.1 Million arrivals 2020
Tourism share of GDP 18% to 40%
Rooms from 4200 to Units
Employment 2011 – – >2012 –
Curacao diverse product portfolio
Weekend Curacao
tourist arrivals 2020
GDP 18% to 33%
Rooms from to Units
Employment 2011 – – >2012 –
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Exclusive Curacao
tourist arrivals 2020
Tourism share of GDP 18% to 24%
Rooms from to Units
Employment 2011 – – >2012 –

33. Summary Scenarios
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

34. 4.3 Interview Social sustainability
Curaçao residents’ perceptions and evaluation of tourism impacts and their support for tourism development in their area.
Interview subqeustions
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Characteristics of residents in Curacao?
positive and negative impacts of physical tourism development in Curacao.
How do Curacao residents perceive tourism impacts and how do they evaluate these impacts?
Which of the variables under study explain the residents’ support for tourism development in Curacao?

35. 4.3 Conceptual framework
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
This study used the survey questionnaire method for data collection by the WTO (World tourism organisation).

36. 4.3 Instrument 53 Items Five-point Likert scale
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

37. 4.3 Population & Sample unit
Inhabitants
6 districts
Target areas:
-Santa Catharina
-Jan Thiel
-Willemstad
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Total 71
42 completed data

38. Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks (Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

39. Evaluation tourism Impacts
Positive
Locals have positive perceptions of tourism impacts.
Tourism had improved the quality of products and services.
Increased residents’ pride
Negative:
Contributed to the preservation of the natural environment
Restoration of historic buildings 
Energy usage and electric problems
Access to coastal regions due to developments
Sewage over flow in certain regions
Concerns over the fact that the prices of real estate and many goods and services has increased.
Diminishing of natural landscapes and agricultural
Disagree:
tourism is damaging their culture
Limited their use of recreational facilities
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

40. 4.4 Case study 4 4.1 The case of study Curacao
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

41. 4.4 Overview of Curacao tourism developments
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

42. 4.4 Case study Jan Thiel resort
Environmental policy:
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Energy usage, per guest per day (kwh)

43. 4.4 Case study Hilton Hotel
Environmental policy:
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Sewage per guest/per day

44. 4.4 Case study Jan Thiel resort
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Energy saving techniques or devices

45. 4.4 Case study summary
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

46. 5. Practical results & Findings
Pressure on energy net
Enviromental destruction
Sustainable policy
Scenarios _Dynamic_ Exclusive_Weekend
1.1 Million arrivals 2020
Tourism share of GDP 18% to 40%
Rooms from 4200 to Units
Employment 2011 – – >2012 –
Social: Impact
-Employment increase
-No access to coastzones
-Facilities
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

47. Practical results
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

48. Future developments should
Governmental officials to cater to the massive influx of tourist
Accommodations
Protecting the environment thus means indirectly protecting your product.
minimize impacts on the environment,
strengthen the social cohesion and sustain a
long-term economic viability of the tourism industry
integration
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

49. 6. Pilot project Santa Catharina4
SWOT Analyses
development issues & research findings
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Architecture

50. 6. Pilot project Santa Catharina
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Blue Airport – red project location – yellow willemstad
Green St. Joris Baai

51. 6. Santa Catharina Swot assessment
No vision
Littering on estate
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

52. 6. Santa Catharina Swot assessment
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

54. 6. Context Analyses
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

55. 6. Development issues, research findings
Guidelines:
Economical
Mixed use
Open spaces / Conenctivity
Varitation
Social
Accessibilty
Community
Intergration
Eco park ( on foot)
Enviromental
Ecological sustainable vision
Optimal use of resources
Sustainable Architecture
Maintenance
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

56. 6. Santa Catharina Entrance
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

57. 6. Santa Catharina Social Landmark
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

58. 6. Santa Catharina Landhuis
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

59. 6. Santa Catharina Caribbean sea view
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

60. 6. Santa Catharina Boca`s
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

61. 6. Santa Catharina Caribbean sea
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

62. 6. Santa Catharina Ecomomical Hub
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

63. 6. Santa Catharina Strategy Phase 1
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

64. 5. Development issues, research findings
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

65. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

66. 6. Development issues linking
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

67. 6. SC phase with guidelines
Economical
Mixed use
Open spaces / Conenctivity
Varitation
Social
Accessibilty
Community
Intergration
Eco park ( on foot)
Enviromental
Ecological sustainable vision
Optimal use of resources
Sustainable Architecture
Maintenance
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

68. 6. Development issues, research findings
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

69. 6. Accessibility / Connectivity
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

70. 6. Estimated size of lots
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

71. 6. Architecture style & Density
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

72. 6. Typology building height max 6 meters
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

73. 6. Santa Catharina Eco
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

74. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

75. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

76. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

77. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

78. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

79. 6. Santa Catharina Eco village
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

80. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

81. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

82. 6. Santa Catharina Sustainable vision
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

83. 6. Next steps Environmental assessment – SUN – WIND- LAND – WATER
Architecture / Material usages
Estimated cost of Infrastructure
Pre-development cost / Lots
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

84. Recommendations & Conclusions
-Further analysis of: Ko (2005) Sustainable assessment the other nine dimensions.
Example this research was based only on three dimensions.
-Further analysis of Sustainable assessment on tourism developments. Example this
research was based on SIDS, it is better to sample from a worldwide level.
-Further analysis of the development of good practice in sustainable tourism through developing a transparent measurement, monitoring and reporting system.
- Further analysis of eco certificate for tourism developmen, awarded good practice examples, e.g. Fiskars Village (Finland), the winner from the Royal Awards for sustainable tourism. ts
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).

85. 7. Comment & Questions
Animated mountain picture grows into view and shrinks
(Advanced)
Tip: This slide includes three small pictures and one large version of the top small picture. The small pictures are 1.88” high and 2.5” wide. The large picture is 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). Before following the procedures below, size each of the three pictures you will insert into the slide to 7.5” high by 10” wide. You will also need to use drawing guides to position your pictures on the slide.
To display and set the drawing guides, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.
Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. As you drag the guides, the cursor will display the new position.)
On the slide, do the following:
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it up to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the horizontal guide, and then drag it down to the 2.17 position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it right to the position.
Press and hold CTRL, select the vertical guide, and then drag it left to the position.
To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Snip Diagonal Corner Rectangle (fifth option from the left).
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline.
On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Type list, select Linear.
Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until two stops appear in the slider.
Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:
Select the first stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 0%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 51%.
Select the second stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
In the Position box, enter 100%.
In the Transparency box, enter 85%.
Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:
In the Shape Height box, enter 1.5”.
In the Shape Width box, enter 8.42”.
Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process one more time for a total of three rectangles.
Drag the first rectangle and center it vertically on the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Drag the second rectangle and center it vertically on the middle horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Drag the third rectangle and center it vertically on the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Press and hold CTRL, and then select all three rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:
Click Align to Slide.
Click Align Center.
To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Images group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, on the Size tab, under Scale, clear the Lock aspect ratio box, and then under Size and rotate, do the following:
In the Height box, enter 1.88”.
In the Width box, enter 2.5”.
Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Border, and then do the following:
Under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt.
On the slide, drag the picture until it is centered at the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the second picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the second picture until it is centered at the intersection of the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
Select the second picture. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Right-click the third picture, and then select Change Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert.
On the slide, drag the third picture until it is centered at the intersection of the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50).
To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.
Type the text you want to appear in the text box, and then select the text. Format the text in the textbox using the following steps:
On the Home tab, in the Font group, choose the Calibri font and a font size of 18.
Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
In the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left.
Select the text box, and then drag the it to the right of the first picture, above the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Copy, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the second text box, and then type text for the second picture caption.
Select the second text box, and then drag the it to the right of the second picture, above the center horizontal drawing guide (0.00).
Select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.
Click in the third text box, and then type for the third picture caption.
Select the third text box, and then drag the it to the right of the third picture, above the bottom horizontal drawing guide (2.17).
To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” version of the picture that fills the top small rectangle on the slide, and then click Insert.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select After Previous.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then, under Amount, click Tiny.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 0.01.
On the slide, select the picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Entrance Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On click.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select With Previous.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Duration box, enter 2.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Huge.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Motion Paths. In the Add Motion Path dialog box, under Lines and Curves, click Up, and then click OK.
On the slide, select the up motion path. Point to the endpoint (red arrow) until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Drag the endpoint to the intersection of the top horizontal drawing guide (2.17) and the left vertical drawing guide (2.50), at the center of the first small picture.
Right-click the up motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Locked.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Emphasis Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink, and then click OK.
On the Animations tab, in the Timing group, in the Start list, select On Click.
On the Animations tab, in the Animation group, click Effect Options, and then click Tiny.
On the slide, select the large picture. On the Animations tab, in the Advanced Animation group, click Add Animation, and then click More Exit Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear, and then click OK.
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Guides checkbox.
To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:
On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:
In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).
Under Gradient stops, click Add gradient stops or Remove gradient stops until three stops appear in the slider.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, fourth option from the left).
In the Transparency box, enter 0%.
In the Position box, enter 50%.
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left).
Select the third stop from the left in the slider, and then do the following:
Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).